* top.c (quit_target): Check for target_has_execution before
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
494@item -E
495@itemx --export-dynamic
496When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502mentioned in the link.
503
504If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507linking the program itself.
508
55255dae 509You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 510be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 511See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 512
36f63dca 513@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
514@cindex big-endian objects
515@cindex endianness
516@kindex -EB
517@item -EB
518Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
519
520@cindex little-endian objects
521@kindex -EL
522@item -EL
523Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 524@end ifclear
252b5132 525
2509a395
SL
526@kindex -f @var{name}
527@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
528@item -f @var{name}
529@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
530When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
531to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
532table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
533symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
534
535If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
536run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
537the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
538first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
539@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
540in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
541Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
542implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
543machine specific performance.
544
545This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
546will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
547
2509a395
SL
548@kindex -F @var{name}
549@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 550@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 551@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
552When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
553the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
554of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
555on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
556
557If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
558run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
559dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
560filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
561found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
562used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
563@var{name}.
564
ff5dcc92 565Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 566toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
567object files.
568@ifclear SingleFormat
569The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 570@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 571@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
572environment variable.
573@end ifclear
574The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
575creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 576
3dbf70a2 577@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -fini=@var{name}
579@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
580When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
581executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
582address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
583the function to call.
584
252b5132
RH
585@kindex -g
586@item -g
587Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
588
2509a395
SL
589@kindex -G @var{value}
590@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 591@cindex object size
2509a395 592@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
593@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
594Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
595@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
596MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
597sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
598
599@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 600@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 601@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 602@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
603@itemx -soname=@var{name}
604When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
605the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
606which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
607linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
608field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
609
610@kindex -i
611@cindex incremental link
612@item -i
613Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
614
3dbf70a2 615@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
616@kindex -init=@var{name}
617@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
618When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
619executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
620of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
621function to call.
622
252b5132 623@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 624@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 625@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 626@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
627@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
628Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
629list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
630If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
631will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
632will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 633
ff5dcc92 634On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
635files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
636and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
637called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
638@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
639indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
640to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
641@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
642
643The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
644specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
645was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
646command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
647archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
648the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
649
ff5dcc92 650See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
651archives multiple times.
652
653You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
654
655@ifset GENERIC
656This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 657if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
658behaviour of the AIX linker.
659@end ifset
660
661@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 662@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 663@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 664@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 665@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
666Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
667for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
668option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
669in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
670on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 671@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
672order in which the options appear.
673
9c8ebd6a
DJ
674If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
675by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
676
252b5132
RH
677@ifset UsesEnvVars
678The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 679@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
680some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
681@end ifset
682
683The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
684@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
685at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
686
687@cindex emulation
688@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 689@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
690Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
691emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
692
693If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
694@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
695
696Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
697configured.
698
699@cindex link map
700@kindex -M
701@kindex --print-map
702@item -M
703@itemx --print-map
704Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
705information about the link, including the following:
706
707@itemize @bullet
708@item
3b83e13a 709Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
710@item
711How common symbols are allocated.
712@item
713All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
714which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
715@item
716The values assigned to symbols.
717
718Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
719involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
720have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
721linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
722of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
723the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
724linker script containing:
725
726@smallexample
727 foo = 1
728 foo = foo * 4
729 foo = foo + 8
730@end smallexample
731
732will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
733option is used:
734
735@smallexample
736 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
737 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
738 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
739@end smallexample
740
741See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
742scripts.
252b5132
RH
743@end itemize
744
745@kindex -n
746@cindex read-only text
747@cindex NMAGIC
748@kindex --nmagic
749@item -n
750@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 751Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 752@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
753
754@kindex -N
755@kindex --omagic
756@cindex read/write from cmd line
757@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 758@item -N
252b5132
RH
759@itemx --omagic
760Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
761not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
762libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
763mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
764is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
765specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
766
767@kindex --no-omagic
768@cindex OMAGIC
769@item --no-omagic
770This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
771sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
772be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
773shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
774
775@kindex -o @var{output}
776@kindex --output=@var{output}
777@cindex naming the output file
778@item -o @var{output}
779@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 780Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
781option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
782script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
783
784@kindex -O @var{level}
785@cindex generating optimized output
786@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 787If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 788the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
789should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
790option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
791the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
792no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
793of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 794
a712da20
NC
795@kindex -q
796@kindex --emit-relocs
797@cindex retain relocations in final executable
798@item -q
799@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 800Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
801Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
802order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
803in larger executables.
804
dbab7a7b
NC
805This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
806
4f471f39
RS
807@kindex --force-dynamic
808@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
809@item --force-dynamic
810Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
811to VxWorks targets.
812
252b5132
RH
813@cindex partial link
814@cindex relocatable output
815@kindex -r
1049f94e 816@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 817@item -r
1049f94e 818@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 819Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 820turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
821linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
822magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
823@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 824@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
825If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
826linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
827constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
828
62bf86b4
HPN
829When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
830partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
831relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
832example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
833with input files in other formats at all.
834
252b5132
RH
835This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
836
837@kindex -R @var{file}
838@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
839@cindex symbol-only input
840@item -R @var{filename}
841@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
842Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
843relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
844to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
845programs. You may use this option more than once.
846
ff5dcc92 847For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 848followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 849the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
850
851@kindex -s
852@kindex --strip-all
853@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 854@item -s
252b5132
RH
855@itemx --strip-all
856Omit all symbol information from the output file.
857
858@kindex -S
859@kindex --strip-debug
860@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 861@item -S
252b5132
RH
862@itemx --strip-debug
863Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
864
865@kindex -t
866@kindex --trace
867@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 868@item -t
252b5132 869@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 870Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
871
872@kindex -T @var{script}
873@kindex --script=@var{script}
874@cindex script files
875@item -T @var{scriptfile}
876@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
877Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 878@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 879@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
880output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
881the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
882specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
883options accumulate.
252b5132 884
14be8564
L
885@kindex -dT @var{script}
886@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
887@cindex script files
888@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
889@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
890Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
891
892This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
893processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
894command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
895@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
896behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
897command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
898the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
899@samp{gcc}).
900
252b5132
RH
901@kindex -u @var{symbol}
902@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
903@cindex undefined symbol
904@item -u @var{symbol}
905@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
906Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
907symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
908modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
909different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
910option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
911
912@kindex -Ur
913@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 914@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
915For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
916@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 917turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
918@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
919It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
920with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
921be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
922@samp{-r} for the others.
923
577a0623
AM
924@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
925@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
926Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
927@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
928missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
929specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
930multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
931input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
932in a linker script.
a854a4a7 933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -v
935@kindex -V
936@kindex --version
937@cindex version
938@item -v
939@itemx --version
940@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 941Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
942lists the supported emulations.
943
944@kindex -x
945@kindex --discard-all
946@cindex deleting local symbols
947@item -x
948@itemx --discard-all
949Delete all local symbols.
950
951@kindex -X
952@kindex --discard-locals
953@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 954@item -X
252b5132 955@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
956Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
957system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
958or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -y @var{symbol}
961@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
962@cindex symbol tracing
963@item -y @var{symbol}
964@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
965Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
966option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
967to prepend an underscore.
968
969This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
970don't know where the reference is coming from.
971
972@kindex -Y @var{path}
973@item -Y @var{path}
974Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
975for Solaris compatibility.
976
977@kindex -z @var{keyword}
978@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
979The recognized keywords are:
980@table @samp
981
982@item combreloc
983Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
984lookup caching possible.
985
986@item defs
560e09e9 987Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 988shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 989
6aa29e7b
JJ
990@item execstack
991Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
992
cd6d6c15
NC
993@item initfirst
994This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
995It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
996before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
997the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
998the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
999objects.
1000
1001@item interpose
1002Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1003but the primary executable.
1004
5fa222e4
AM
1005@item lazy
1006When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1007dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1008the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1009Lazy binding is the default.
1010
cd6d6c15
NC
1011@item loadfltr
1012Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1013runtime.
1014
1015@item muldefs
1016Allows multiple definitions.
1017
1018@item nocombreloc
1019Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1020
1021@item nocopyreloc
1022Disables production of copy relocs.
1023
1024@item nodefaultlib
1025Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1026ignore any default library search paths.
1027
1028@item nodelete
1029Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1030
1031@item nodlopen
1032Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1033
1034@item nodump
1035Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1036
6aa29e7b
JJ
1037@item noexecstack
1038Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1039
1040@item norelro
1041Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item now
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1046when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1047deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1048first called.
1049
1050@item origin
1051Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1052
6aa29e7b
JJ
1053@item relro
1054Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1055
24718e3b
L
1056@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1057Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1058
1059@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1060Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@end table
1063
ece2d90e 1064Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1065
1066@kindex -(
1067@cindex groups of archives
1068@item -( @var{archives} -)
1069@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1070The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1071either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1072
1073The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1074references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1075the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1076archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1077object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1078would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1079they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1080resolved.
1081
1082Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1083it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1084more archives.
1085
69da35b5
NC
1086@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1087@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1088@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1089@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1090Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1091recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1092and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1093the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1094behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1095so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1096restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1097
4a43e768
AM
1098@kindex --as-needed
1099@kindex --no-as-needed
1100@item --as-needed
1101@itemx --no-as-needed
1102This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1103on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1104the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1105on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1106needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1107for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1108which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1109the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1110linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1111@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1112
e56f61be
L
1113@kindex --add-needed
1114@kindex --no-add-needed
1115@item --add-needed
1116@itemx --no-add-needed
1117This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1118DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1119the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1120a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1121@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1122for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1123the default behaviour.
1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1126@item -assert @var{keyword}
1127This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -Bdynamic
1130@kindex -dy
1131@kindex -call_shared
1132@item -Bdynamic
1133@itemx -dy
1134@itemx -call_shared
1135Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1136for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1137default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1138for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1139multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1140@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1141
a1ab1d2a
UD
1142@kindex -Bgroup
1143@item -Bgroup
1144Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1145section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1146object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1147@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1148only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1149
252b5132
RH
1150@kindex -Bstatic
1151@kindex -dn
1152@kindex -non_shared
1153@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1154@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1155@itemx -dn
1156@itemx -non_shared
1157@itemx -static
1158Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1159platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1160variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1161may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1162library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1163option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1164option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1165shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1166references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1167libraries.
252b5132
RH
1168
1169@kindex -Bsymbolic
1170@item -Bsymbolic
1171When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1172definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1173for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1174within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1175platforms which support shared libraries.
1176
40b36307
L
1177@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1178@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1179When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1180symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1181This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1182libraries.
1183
55255dae
L
1184@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1185@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1186Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1187typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1188global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1189within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1190to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1191in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1192which support shared libraries.
1193
1194The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1195scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1196
40b36307
L
1197@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1198@item --dynamic-list-data
1199Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1200
1201@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1202@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1203Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1204is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1205
0b8a70d9
L
1206@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1207@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1208Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1209
252b5132
RH
1210@kindex --check-sections
1211@kindex --no-check-sections
1212@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1213@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1214Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1215been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1216perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1217suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1218allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1219restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1220Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1221force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1222option.
252b5132
RH
1223
1224@cindex cross reference table
1225@kindex --cref
1226@item --cref
1227Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1228generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1229Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1230
1231The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1232easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1233sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1234symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1235definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1236
4818e05f
AM
1237@cindex common allocation
1238@kindex --no-define-common
1239@item --no-define-common
1240This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1241The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1242@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1243
1244The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1245the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1246of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1247forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1248Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1249from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1250This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1251and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1252duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1253paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1254
252b5132 1255@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1256@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1257@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1258Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1259address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1260times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1261limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1262context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1263symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1264constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1265using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1266Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1267space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1268@var{expression}.
1269
1270@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1271@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1272@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1273@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1274@itemx --no-demangle
1275These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1276and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1277present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1278underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1279mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1280different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1281to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1282demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1283is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1284
1285@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1286@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1287@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1288@item -I@var{file}
1289@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1290Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1291generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1292linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1293doing.
1294
7ce691ae 1295@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1296@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1297@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1298@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1299Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1300with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1301
252b5132
RH
1302@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1303@item --force-exe-suffix
1304Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1305
1306If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1307@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1308the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1309option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1310Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1311it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1312
1313@kindex --gc-sections
1314@kindex --no-gc-sections
1315@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1316@item --gc-sections
1317@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1318Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1319targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1320performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1321@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1322
d5465ba2
AM
1323@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1324examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1325symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1326command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1327referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1328libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1329referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1330the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1331relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1332
ac69cbc6
TG
1333This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1334@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1335specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1336a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1337
c17d87de
NC
1338@kindex --print-gc-sections
1339@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1340@cindex garbage collection
1341@item --print-gc-sections
1342@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1343List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1344printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1345collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1346default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1347be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1348line.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@cindex help
1351@cindex usage
1352@kindex --help
1353@item --help
1354Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1355
ea20a7da
CC
1356@kindex --target-help
1357@item --target-help
1358Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1359
2509a395
SL
1360@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1361@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1362Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1363@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1364
1365@cindex memory usage
1366@kindex --no-keep-memory
1367@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1368@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1369symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1370instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1371necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1372while linking a large executable.
1373
1374@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1375@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1376@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1377@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1378Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1379is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1380The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1381behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1382libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1383
aa713662
L
1384@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1385@kindex -z muldefs
1386@item --allow-multiple-definition
1387@itemx -z muldefs
1388Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1389report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1390first definition will be used.
1391
b79e8c78 1392@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1393@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1394@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1395@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1396Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1397This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1398determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1399shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1400how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1401
903249d7
NC
1402The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1403referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1404an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1405a shared library.
1406
1407The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1408libraries specified at link time are that:
1409
1410@itemize @bullet
1411@item
1412A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1413that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1414resolvable at load time.
1415@item
1416There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1417symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1418
1419The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1420select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1421architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1422appropriate memset function.
1423@end itemize
b79e8c78 1424
31941635
L
1425@kindex --no-undefined-version
1426@item --no-undefined-version
1427Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1428it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1429will be issued instead.
1430
3e3b46e5
PB
1431@kindex --default-symver
1432@item --default-symver
1433Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1434exported symbols.
1435
1436@kindex --default-imported-symver
1437@item --default-imported-symver
1438Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1439imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1440
252b5132
RH
1441@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1442@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1443Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1444files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1445been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1446This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1447errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1448have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1449inappropriate.
1450
fe7929ce
AM
1451@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1452@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1453Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1454library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1455
252b5132
RH
1456@kindex --no-whole-archive
1457@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1458Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1459archive files.
1460
1461@cindex output file after errors
1462@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1463@item --noinhibit-exec
1464Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1465Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1466errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1467when it issues any error whatsoever.
1468
0a9c1c8e
CD
1469@kindex -nostdlib
1470@item -nostdlib
1471Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1472command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1473(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1474
252b5132 1475@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1477@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1478@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1479file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1480@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1481object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1482object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1483should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1484usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1485name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1486list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1487command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1488this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1489@end ifclear
1490
36af4a4e
JJ
1491@kindex -pie
1492@kindex --pic-executable
1493@item -pie
1494@itemx --pic-executable
1495@cindex position independent executables
1496Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1497ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1498libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1499address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1500normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1501defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1502
252b5132
RH
1503@kindex -qmagic
1504@item -qmagic
1505This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1506
1507@kindex -Qy
1508@item -Qy
1509This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1510
1511@kindex --relax
1512@cindex synthesizing linker
1513@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1514@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1515An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1516@ifset GENERIC
1517This option is only supported on a few targets.
1518@end ifset
1519@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1520@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1521@end ifset
1522@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1523@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1524@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1525@ifset XTENSA
1526@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1527@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1528@ifset M68HC11
1529@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1530@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1531@ifset POWERPC
1532@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1533@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1534
1535On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1536optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1537in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1538instructions in the output object file.
1539
1540On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1541debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1542@ifset GENERIC
1543This is known to be
1544the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1545@end ifset
1546
1547@ifset GENERIC
1548On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1549but ignored.
1550@end ifset
1551
1552@cindex retaining specified symbols
1553@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1554@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1555@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1556@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1557Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1558discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1559symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1560@ifset GENERIC
1561(such as VxWorks)
1562@end ifset
1563where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1564run-time memory.
1565
1566@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1567or symbols needed for relocations.
1568
1569You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1570line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1571
1572@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1573@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1574@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1575@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1576Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1577linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1578arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1579them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1580also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1581objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1582@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1583ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1584@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1585
ff5dcc92 1586The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1587SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1588@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1589runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1590options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1591gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1592file systems.
252b5132 1593
ff5dcc92 1594For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1595followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1596the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598
1599@ifset GENERIC
1600@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1601@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1602@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1603When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1604happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1605of the input files.
1606
1607When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1608non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1609shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1610explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1611specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1612@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1613either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1614appearing multiple times.
1615
28c309a2
NC
1616This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1617that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1618is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1619runtime linker would do.
1620
252b5132 1621The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1622libraries:
252b5132
RH
1623@enumerate
1624@item
ff5dcc92 1625Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1626@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1627Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1628between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1629specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1630used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1631at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1632by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1633the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1634@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1635On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1636@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1637environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1638@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1639On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1640directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1641@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1642For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1643variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1644@item
ec4eb78a
L
1645For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1646@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1647libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1648@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1649@item
252b5132
RH
1650The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1651@item
1652For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1653exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1654@end enumerate
1655
1656If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1657warning and continue with the link.
1658@end ifset
1659
1660@kindex -shared
1661@kindex -Bshareable
1662@item -shared
1663@itemx -Bshareable
1664@cindex shared libraries
1665Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1666and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1667shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1668undefined symbols in the link.
1669
252b5132 1670@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1671@item --sort-common
1672@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1673@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1674This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1675ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1676sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1677eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1678between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1679specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1680
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex --sort-section=name
1682@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1683This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1684patterns in the linker script.
1685
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1687@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1688This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1689patterns in the linker script.
1690
252b5132 1691@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1692@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1693Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1694each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1695size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1696
1697@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1698@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1699Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1700output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1701This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1702certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1703cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1704that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1705support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1706input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1707more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1708many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1709
1710@kindex --stats
1711@item --stats
1712Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1713as execution time and memory usage.
1714
2509a395 1715@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1716@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1717Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1718configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1719that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1720
252b5132
RH
1721@kindex --traditional-format
1722@cindex traditional format
1723@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1724For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1725the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1726use the traditional format instead.
1727
1728@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1729For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1730symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1731full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1732@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1733trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1734combine duplicate entries.
1735
2509a395
SL
1736@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1737@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1738Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1739address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1740times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1741line.
1742@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1743for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1744@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1745should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1746sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1747
2509a395
SL
1748@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1749@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1750@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1751@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1752@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1753@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1754@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1755Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1756@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1757
2509a395
SL
1758@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1759@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1760@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1761When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1762of the first byte of the text segment.
1763
560e09e9
NC
1764@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1765@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1766Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1767values for @samp{method}:
1768
1769@table @samp
1770@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1771Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1772
1773@item report-all
da8bce14 1774Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1775
1776@item ignore-in-object-files
1777Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1778ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1779
1780@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1781Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1782ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1783when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1784libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1785command line.
1786@end table
1787
1788The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1789by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1790
1791Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1792unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1793can change this to a warning.
1794
252b5132
RH
1795@kindex --verbose
1796@cindex verbose
1797@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1798@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1799Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1800supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1801the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1802
1803@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1804@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1805@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1806Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1807used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1808about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1809is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1810@xref{VERSION}.
1811
7ce691ae 1812@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1813@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1814@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1815@item --warn-common
1816Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1817a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1818but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1819you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1820Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1821warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1822
1823There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1824
1825@table @samp
1826@item int i = 1;
1827A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1828file.
1829
1830@item extern int i;
1831An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1832There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1833variable somewhere.
1834
1835@item int i;
1836A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1837variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1838The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1839single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1840size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1841a definition of the same variable.
1842@end table
1843
1844The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1845Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1846just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1847encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1848a common symbol.
1849
1850@enumerate
1851@item
1852Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1853definition for the symbol.
1854@smallexample
1855@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1856 overridden by definition
1857@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1858@end smallexample
1859
1860@item
1861Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1862the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1863except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1864@smallexample
1865@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overriding common
1867@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1868@end smallexample
1869
1870@item
1871Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1872@smallexample
1873@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1874 of `@var{symbol}'
1875@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1876@end smallexample
1877
1878@item
1879Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1880@smallexample
1881@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1882 overridden by larger common
1883@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1884@end smallexample
1885
1886@item
1887Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1888the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1889encountered in a different order.
1890@smallexample
1891@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1892 overriding smaller common
1893@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1894@end smallexample
1895@end enumerate
1896
1897@kindex --warn-constructors
1898@item --warn-constructors
1899Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1900object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1901detect the use of global constructors.
1902
1903@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1904@item --warn-multiple-gp
1905Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1906This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1907Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1908section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1909of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1910base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1911base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1912bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1913large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1914values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1915option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1916
1917@kindex --warn-once
1918@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1919@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1920@item --warn-once
1921Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1922which refers to it.
1923
1924@kindex --warn-section-align
1925@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1926@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1927@item --warn-section-align
1928Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1929alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1930The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1931is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1932the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1933
8fdd7217
NC
1934@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1935@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1936Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1937
560e09e9
NC
1938@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1939@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1940If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1941@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1942This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1943
1944@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1945@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1946This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1947it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1948
252b5132
RH
1949@kindex --whole-archive
1950@cindex including an entire archive
1951@item --whole-archive
1952For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1953@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1954in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1955files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1956library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1957library. This option may be used more than once.
1958
7ec229ce 1959Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1960about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1961Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1962list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1963your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1964
2509a395
SL
1965@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1966@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1967Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1968@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1969undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1970@var{symbol}.
1971
1972This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1973wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1974wishes to call the system function, it should call
1975@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1976
1977Here is a trivial example:
1978
1979@smallexample
1980void *
cc2f008e 1981__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1982@{
cc2f008e 1983 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1984 return __real_malloc (c);
1985@}
1986@end smallexample
1987
ff5dcc92 1988If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1989all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1990instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1991call the real @code{malloc} function.
1992
1993You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1994links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1995you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1996file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1997call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1998
6aa29e7b
JJ
1999@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2000@item --eh-frame-hdr
2001Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2002@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2003
6c1439be
L
2004@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2005@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2006@item --enable-new-dtags
2007@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2008This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2009systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2010@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2011If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2012created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2013those options are only available for ELF systems.
2014
2d643429 2015@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2016@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2017Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2018close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2019time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2020increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2021value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2022
fdc90cb4
JJ
2023@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2024@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2025Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2026@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2027new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2028the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2029hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2030
35835446
JR
2031@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2032@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2033This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2034linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2035for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2036about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2037
4f9c04f7 2038Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20391021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2040run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2041has been used.
2042
2043The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2044enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2045
c0065db7
RM
2046@kindex --build-id
2047@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2048@item --build-id
2049@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2050Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2051The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2052file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2053@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2054parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2055@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2056@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2057an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2058characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2059omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2060
2061The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2062that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2063unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2064to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2065file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2066string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2067
2068Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2069@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2070@end table
2071
0285c67d
NC
2072@c man end
2073
36f63dca 2074@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2075
0285c67d
NC
2076@c man begin OPTIONS
2077
ff5dcc92 2078The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2079the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2080normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2081use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2082@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2083like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2084symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2085object file).
2086
2087In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2088support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2089PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2090values by either a space or an equals sign.
2091
ff5dcc92 2092@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2095@item --add-stdcall-alias
2096If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2097as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2098[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2099
2100@kindex --base-file
2101@item --base-file @var{file}
2102Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2103addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2104@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2105[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --dll
2108@item --dll
2109Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2110@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2111file.
bb10df36 2112[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2113
88183869
DK
2114@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2115@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2116@item --enable-long-section-names
2117@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2118The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2119the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2120for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2121fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2122to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2123allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2124disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2125generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2126as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2127with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers.
2128[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2129
252b5132
RH
2130@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2131@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2132@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2133@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2134If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2135do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2136only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2137resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2138undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2139@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2140to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2141warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2142import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2143to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2144feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2145@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2146mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2147[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2148
2149@cindex DLLs, creating
2150@kindex --export-all-symbols
2151@item --export-all-symbols
2152If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2153be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2154otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2155explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2156attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2157option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2158@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2159@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2160exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2161re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2162such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2163@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2164@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2165Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2166not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2167extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2168(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2169These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2170@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2171@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2172@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2173@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2174[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2175
2176@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2177@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2178Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2179exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --file-alignment
2183@item --file-alignment
2184Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2185file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2186512.
bb10df36 2187[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2188
2189@cindex heap size
2190@kindex --heap
2191@item --heap @var{reserve}
2192@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2193Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2194to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2195committed.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2197
2198@cindex image base
2199@kindex --image-base
2200@item --image-base @var{value}
2201Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2202the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2203is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2204your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2205other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2206for dlls.
bb10df36 2207[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2208
2209@kindex --kill-at
2210@item --kill-at
2211If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2212symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2213[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2214
26d2d8a2
BF
2215@kindex --large-address-aware
2216@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2217If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2218header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2219greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2220or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2221section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2222[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2223
252b5132
RH
2224@kindex --major-image-version
2225@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2226Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2227[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2228
2229@kindex --major-os-version
2230@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2231Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2232[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2233
2234@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2235@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2236Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2237[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2238
2239@kindex --minor-image-version
2240@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2241Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2242[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2243
2244@kindex --minor-os-version
2245@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2246Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2247[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2248
2249@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2250@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2251Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2252[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2253
2254@cindex DEF files, creating
2255@cindex DLLs, creating
2256@kindex --output-def
2257@item --output-def @var{file}
2258The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2259file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2260(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2261library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2262automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2264
b044cda1
CW
2265@cindex DLLs, creating
2266@kindex --out-implib
2267@item --out-implib @var{file}
2268The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2269import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2270import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2271may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2272makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2273creation step.
bb10df36 2274[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2275
2276@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2277@item --enable-auto-image-base
2278Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2279using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2280from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2281collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2282avoided.
bb10df36 2283[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2284
2285@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2286@item --disable-auto-image-base
2287Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2288user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2289default.
bb10df36 2290[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2291
2292@cindex DLLs, linking to
2293@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2294@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2295When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2296search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2297@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2298between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2299uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2300@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2302
2303@kindex --enable-auto-import
2304@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2305Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2306DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2307building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2308'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2309to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2310specification published by Microsoft.
2311
e2a83dd0
NC
2312Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2313data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2314placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2315around a problem with consts that is described here:
2316http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2317
4d8907ac
DS
2318Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2319see this message:
0d888aac 2320
ece2d90e 2321"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2322documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2323
ece2d90e
NC
2324This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2325ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2326allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2327fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2328constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2329multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2330this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2331of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2332the warning, and exit.
2333
2334There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2335data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2336
2fa9fc65
NC
2337One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2338of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2339this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2340
c0065db7
RM
2341A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2342that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2343there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2344a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2345
2346@example
2347extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2348extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2349 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2350@end example
2351
2352or
2353
2354@example
2355extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2356extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2357 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2358@end example
2359
c0065db7 2360For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2361is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2362
2363@example
2364extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2365extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2366 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2367@end example
2368
c406afaf
NC
2369or
2370
2371@example
2372extern long long extern_ll;
2373extern_ll -->
2374 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2375@end example
2376
2fa9fc65 2377A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2378'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2379@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2380requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2381building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2382merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2383between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2384constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2385
2386Original:
2387@example
2388--foo.h
2389extern int arr[];
2390--foo.c
2391#include "foo.h"
2392void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2393 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2394@}
2395@end example
2396
2397Solution 1:
2398@example
2399--foo.h
2400extern int arr[];
2401--foo.c
2402#include "foo.h"
2403void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2404 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2405 volatile int *parr = arr;
2406 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2407@}
2408@end example
2409
2410Solution 2:
2411@example
2412--foo.h
2413/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2414#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2415 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2416#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2417#else
2418#define FOO_IMPORT
2419#endif
2420extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2421--foo.c
2422#include "foo.h"
2423void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2424 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2425@}
2426@end example
2427
c0065db7 2428A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2429library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2430for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2431functions).
bb10df36 2432[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2433
2434@kindex --disable-auto-import
2435@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2436Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2437@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2439
2fa9fc65
NC
2440@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2441@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2442If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2443that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2444a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2445environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2446[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2447
2448@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2449@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2450Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2451DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2452[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2453
b044cda1
CW
2454@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2455@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2456Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2457[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2458
252b5132
RH
2459@kindex --section-alignment
2460@item --section-alignment
2461Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2462addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2464
2465@cindex stack size
2466@kindex --stack
2467@item --stack @var{reserve}
2468@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2469Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2470to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2471committed.
bb10df36 2472[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2473
2474@kindex --subsystem
2475@item --subsystem @var{which}
2476@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2477@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2478Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2479legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2480@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2481the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2482@var{which}.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2484
2485@end table
2486
0285c67d
NC
2487@c man end
2488
93fd0973
SC
2489@ifset M68HC11
2490@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2491
2492@c man begin OPTIONS
2493
2494The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2495memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2496
2497@table @gcctabopt
2498
2499@kindex --no-trampoline
2500@item --no-trampoline
2501This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2502is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2503instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2504
2505@kindex --bank-window
2506@item --bank-window @var{name}
2507This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2508the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2509The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2510paging and addresses within the memory window.
2511
2512@end table
2513
2514@c man end
2515@end ifset
2516
7fb9f789
NC
2517@ifset M68K
2518@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2519
2520@c man begin OPTIONS
2521
2522The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2523when linking for 68K targets.
2524
2525@table @gcctabopt
2526
2527@kindex --got
2528@item --got=@var{type}
2529This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2530@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2531@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2532Info entry for @file{ld}.
2533
2534@end table
2535
2536@c man end
2537@end ifset
2538
252b5132
RH
2539@ifset UsesEnvVars
2540@node Environment
2541@section Environment Variables
2542
0285c67d
NC
2543@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2544
560e09e9 2545You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2546@ifclear SingleFormat
2547@code{GNUTARGET},
2548@end ifclear
2549@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2550
36f63dca 2551@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2552@kindex GNUTARGET
2553@cindex default input format
2554@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2555use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2556of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2557@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2558of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2559attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2560this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2561there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2562object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2563BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2564in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2565@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2566
2567@kindex LDEMULATION
2568@cindex default emulation
2569@cindex emulation, default
2570@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2571@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2572behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2573available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2574the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2575variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2576linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2577
2578@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2579@cindex demangling, default
2580Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2581@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2582default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2583a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2584may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2585options.
2586
0285c67d
NC
2587@c man end
2588@end ifset
2589
252b5132
RH
2590@node Scripts
2591@chapter Linker Scripts
2592
2593@cindex scripts
2594@cindex linker scripts
2595@cindex command files
2596Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2597written in the linker command language.
2598
2599The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2600the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2601the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2602more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2603direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2604described below.
2605
2606The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2607yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2608linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2609to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2610such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2611
2612You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2613line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2614default linker script.
2615
2616You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2617to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2618Linker Scripts}.
2619
2620@menu
2621* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2622* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2623* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2624* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2625* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2626* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2627* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2628* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2629* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2630* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2631* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2632@end menu
2633
2634@node Basic Script Concepts
2635@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2636@cindex linker script concepts
2637We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2638describe the linker script language.
2639
2640The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2641file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2642@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2643The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2644purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2645among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2646section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2647in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2648
2649Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2650also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2651contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2652the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2653A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2654area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2655loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2656which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2657of debugging information.
2658
2659Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2660first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2661the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2662@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2663section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2664same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2665is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2666(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2667based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2668RAM address would be the VMA.
2669
2670You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2671program with the @samp{-h} option.
2672
2673Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2674@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2675has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2676information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2677will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2678static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2679referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2680
2681You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2682program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2683option.
2684
2685@node Script Format
2686@section Linker Script Format
2687@cindex linker script format
2688Linker scripts are text files.
2689
2690You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2691either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2692symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2693generally ignored.
2694
2695Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2696If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2697otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2698double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2699file name.
2700
2701You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2702@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2703to whitespace.
2704
2705@node Simple Example
2706@section Simple Linker Script Example
2707@cindex linker script example
2708@cindex example of linker script
2709Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2710
2711The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2712@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2713memory layout of the output file.
2714
2715The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2716describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2717code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2718@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2719Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2720your input files.
2721
2722For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27230x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2724linker script which will do that:
2725@smallexample
2726SECTIONS
2727@{
2728 . = 0x10000;
2729 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2730 . = 0x8000000;
2731 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2732 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2733@}
2734@end smallexample
2735
2736You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2737followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2738descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2739
252b5132
RH
2740The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2741sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2742counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2743other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2744current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2745incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2746@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2747
2748The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2749required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2750after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2751which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2752wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2753means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2754
2755Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2756@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2757@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2758
2759The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2760the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2761at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2762output section, the value of the location counter will be
2763@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2764effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2765immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2766
2767The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2768alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2769example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2770sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2771may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2772sections.
2773
2774That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2775
2776@node Simple Commands
2777@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2778@cindex linker script simple commands
2779In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2780
2781@menu
2782* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2783* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2784@ifclear SingleFormat
2785* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2786@end ifclear
2787
4a93e180 2788* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2789* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2790@end menu
2791
2792@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2793@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2794@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2795@cindex start of execution
2796@cindex first instruction
2797@cindex entry point
2798The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2799point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2800entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2801@smallexample
2802ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2803@end smallexample
2804
2805There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2806entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2807stopping when one of them succeeds:
2808@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2809@item
252b5132 2810the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2811@item
252b5132 2812the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2813@item
252b5132 2814the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2815@item
252b5132 2816the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2817@item
252b5132
RH
2818The address @code{0}.
2819@end itemize
2820
2821@node File Commands
36f63dca 2822@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2823@cindex linker script file commands
2824Several linker script commands deal with files.
2825
2826@table @code
2827@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2828@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2829@cindex including a linker script
2830Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2831be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2832with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
283310 levels deep.
2834
4006703d
NS
2835You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2836@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2837
252b5132
RH
2838@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2839@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2840@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2841@cindex input files in linker scripts
2842@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2843@cindex linker script input object files
2844The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2845in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2846
2847For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2848a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2849then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2850
2851In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2852script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2853
e3f2db7f
AO
2854In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2855with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2856located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2857for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2858open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2859linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2860description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2861
ff5dcc92 2862If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2863name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2864@samp{-l}.
2865
2866When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2867files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2868script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2869
2870@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2871@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2872@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2873@cindex grouping input files
2874The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2875files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2876new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2877in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2878
b717d30e
JJ
2879@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2880@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2881@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2882This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2883commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2884as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2885with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2886when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2887@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2888and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2889setting afterwards.
2890
252b5132
RH
2891@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2892@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2893@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2894The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2895@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2896@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2897Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2898precedence.
2899
2900You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2901output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2902
2903@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2904@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2905@cindex library search path in linker script
2906@cindex archive search path in linker script
2907@cindex search path in linker script
2908The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2909@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2910@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2911on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2912are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2913the command line option are searched first.
2914
2915@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2916@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2917@cindex first input file
2918The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2919that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2920though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2921when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2922first file.
2923@end table
2924
2925@ifclear SingleFormat
2926@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2927@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2928A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2929
2930@table @code
2931@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2932@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2933@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2934@cindex output file format in linker script
2935The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2936output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2937exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2938(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2939line option takes precedence.
2940
2941You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2942formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2943This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2944desired endianness.
2945
2946If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2947will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2948output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2949used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2950
2951For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2952command:
2953@smallexample
2954OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2955@end smallexample
2956This says that the default format for the output file is
2957@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2958option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2959format.
2960
2961@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2962@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2963@cindex input file format in linker script
2964The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2965files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2966This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2967(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2968is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2969command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2970@end table
2971@end ifclear
2972
4a93e180
NC
2973@node REGION_ALIAS
2974@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
2975@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2976@cindex region alias
2977@cindex region names
2978
2979Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
2980@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
2981
2982@smallexample
2983REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2984@end smallexample
2985
2986The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
2987memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
2988to memory regions. An example follows.
2989
2990Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
2991memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
2992that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
2993non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
2994access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
2995read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
2996sections:
2997
2998@itemize @bullet
2999@item
3000@code{.text} program code;
3001@item
3002@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3003@item
3004@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3005@item
3006@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3007@end itemize
3008
3009The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3010part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3011output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3012systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3013@code{C}:
3014@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3015@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3016@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3017@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3018@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3019@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3020@end multitable
3021The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3022loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3023the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3024the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3025
3026The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3027includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3028memory layout:
3029@smallexample
3030INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3031
3032SECTIONS
3033 @{
3034 .text :
3035 @{
3036 *(.text)
3037 @} > REGION_TEXT
3038 .rodata :
3039 @{
3040 *(.rodata)
3041 rodata_end = .;
3042 @} > REGION_RODATA
3043 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3044 @{
3045 data_start = .;
3046 *(.data)
3047 @} > REGION_DATA
3048 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3049 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3050 .bss :
3051 @{
3052 *(.bss)
3053 @} > REGION_BSS
3054 @}
3055@end smallexample
3056
3057Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3058regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3059variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3060@table @code
3061@item A
3062Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3063@smallexample
3064MEMORY
3065 @{
3066 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3067 @}
3068
3069REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3070REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3071REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3072REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3073@end smallexample
3074@item B
3075Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3076into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3077@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3078@smallexample
3079MEMORY
3080 @{
3081 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3082 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3083 @}
3084
3085REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3086REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3087REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3088REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3089@end smallexample
3090@item C
3091Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3092@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3093initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3094system start into the @code{RAM}.
3095@smallexample
3096MEMORY
3097 @{
3098 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3099 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3100 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3101 @}
3102
3103REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3104REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3105REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3106REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3107@end smallexample
3108@end table
3109
3110It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3111@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3112necessary:
3113@smallexample
3114#include <string.h>
3115
3116extern char data_start [];
3117extern char data_size [];
3118extern char data_load_start [];
3119
3120void copy_data(void)
3121@{
3122 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3123 @{
3124 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3125 @}
3126@}
3127@end smallexample
3128
252b5132 3129@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3130@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3131There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3132
3133@table @code
3134@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3135@kindex ASSERT
3136@cindex assertion in linker script
3137Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3138with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3139
3140@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3141@kindex EXTERN
3142@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3143Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3144symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3145modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3146each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3147command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3148
3149@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3150@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3151@cindex common allocation in linker script
3152This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3153to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3154output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3155
4818e05f
AM
3156@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3157@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3158@cindex common allocation in linker script
3159This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3160command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3161to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3162
53d25da6
AM
3163@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3164@kindex INSERT
3165@cindex insert user script into default script
3166This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3167augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3168inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3169@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3170default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3171sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3172linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3173insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3174linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3175default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3176of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3177to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3178is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3179
3180@smallexample
3181SECTIONS
3182@{
3183 OVERLAY :
3184 @{
3185 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3186 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3187 @}
3188@}
3189INSERT AFTER .text;
3190@end smallexample
3191
252b5132
RH
3192@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3193@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3194@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3195This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3196references among certain output sections.
3197
3198In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3199using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3200will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3201errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3202a function defined in the other section.
3203
3204The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3205@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3206an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3207@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3208names.
3209
3210@ifclear SingleFormat
3211@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3212@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3213@cindex machine architecture
3214@cindex architecture
3215Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3216of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3217architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3218the @samp{-f} option.
3219@end ifclear
3220@end table
3221
3222@node Assignments
3223@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3224@cindex assignment in scripts
3225@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3226@cindex variables, defining
3227You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3228the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3229
3230@menu
3231* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3232* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3233* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3234* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3235@end menu
3236
3237@node Simple Assignments
3238@subsection Simple Assignments
3239
3240You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3241
3242@table @code
3243@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3244@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3245@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3246@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3247@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3248@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3249@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3250@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3251@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3252@end table
3253
3254The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3255@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3256defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3257
3258The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3259may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3260
3261The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3262
3263Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3264
3265You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3266statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3267section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3268
3269The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3270expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3271
3272Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3273assignments may be used:
3274
3275@smallexample
3276floating_point = 0;
3277SECTIONS
3278@{
3279 .text :
3280 @{
3281 *(.text)
3282 _etext = .;
3283 @}
156e34dd 3284 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3285 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3286@}
3287@end smallexample
3288@noindent
3289In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3290zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3291the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3292defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3293upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3294
3295@node PROVIDE
3296@subsection PROVIDE
3297@cindex PROVIDE
3298In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3299only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3300the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3301@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3302@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3303@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3304@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3305@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3306
3307Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3308@smallexample
3309SECTIONS
3310@{
3311 .text :
3312 @{
3313 *(.text)
3314 _etext = .;
3315 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3316 @}
3317@}
3318@end smallexample
3319
3320In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3321underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3322the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3323underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3324If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3325linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3326
7af8e998
L
3327@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3328@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3329@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3330Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3331hidden and won't be exported.
3332
73ae6183
NC
3333@node Source Code Reference
3334@subsection Source Code Reference
3335
3336Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3337intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3338a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3339symbol that does not have a value.
3340
3341Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3342transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3343stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3344prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3345mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3346of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3347variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3348linker script variable might be referred to as:
3349
3350@smallexample
3351 extern int foo;
3352@end smallexample
3353
3354But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3355
3356@smallexample
3357 _foo = 1000;
3358@end smallexample
3359
3360In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3361transformation has taken place.
3362
3363When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3364things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3365in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3366second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3367table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3368contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3369value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3370
3371@smallexample
3372 int foo = 1000;
3373@end smallexample
3374
3375creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3376holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3377number 1000 is initially stored.
3378
3379When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3380first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3381memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3382So:
3383
3384@smallexample
3385 foo = 1;
3386@end smallexample
3387
3388looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3389associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3390address. Whereas:
3391
3392@smallexample
3393 int * a = & foo;
3394@end smallexample
3395
3396looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3397and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3398the variable @samp{a}.
3399
3400Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3401the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3402an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3403
3404@smallexample
3405 foo = 1000;
3406@end smallexample
3407
3408creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3409the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3410address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3411linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3412access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3413
3414Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3415you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3416use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3417section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3418linker script contains these declarations:
3419
3420@smallexample
3421@group
3422 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3423 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3424 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3425@end group
3426@end smallexample
3427
3428Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3429
3430@smallexample
3431@group
3432 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3433
73ae6183
NC
3434 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3435@end group
3436@end smallexample
3437
3438Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3439
252b5132 3440@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3441@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3442@kindex SECTIONS
3443The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3444into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3445
3446The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3447@smallexample
3448SECTIONS
3449@{
3450 @var{sections-command}
3451 @var{sections-command}
3452 @dots{}
3453@}
3454@end smallexample
3455
3456Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3457
3458@itemize @bullet
3459@item
3460an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3461@item
3462a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3463@item
3464an output section description
3465@item
3466an overlay description
3467@end itemize
3468
3469The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3470@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3471those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3472understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3473the layout of the output file.
3474
3475Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3476below.
3477
3478If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3479linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3480section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3481input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3482example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3483in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3484
3485@menu
3486* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3487* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3488* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3489* Input Section:: Input section description
3490* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3491* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3492* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3493* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3494* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3495@end menu
3496
3497@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3498@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3499The full description of an output section looks like this:
3500@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3501@group
7e7d5768 3502@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3503 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3504 @{
3505 @var{output-section-command}
3506 @var{output-section-command}
3507 @dots{}
562d3460 3508 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3509@end group
3510@end smallexample
3511
3512Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3513
3514The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3515name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3516The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3517
3518Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3519
3520@itemize @bullet
3521@item
3522a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3523@item
3524an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3525@item
3526data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3527@item
3528a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3529@end itemize
3530
3531@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3532@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3533@cindex name, section
3534@cindex section name
3535The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3536meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3537support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3538must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3539example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3540output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3541names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3542quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3543characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3544commas must be quoted.
3545
3546The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3547Discarding}.
3548
3549@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3550@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3551@cindex address, section
3552@cindex section address
3553The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3554address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3555the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3556based on the current value of the location counter.
3557
3558If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3559set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3560@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3561current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3562requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3563output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3564within the output section.
3565
3566For example,
3567@smallexample
3568.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3569@end smallexample
3570@noindent
3571and
3572@smallexample
3573.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3574@end smallexample
3575@noindent
3576are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3577@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3578counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3579counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3580section.
3581
3582The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3583For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3584so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3585do something like this:
3586@smallexample
3587.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3588@end smallexample
3589@noindent
3590This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3591aligned upward to the specified value.
3592
3593Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3594location counter.
3595
3596@node Input Section
36f63dca 3597@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3598@cindex input sections
3599@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3600The most common output section command is an input section description.
3601
3602The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3603You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3604in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3605map the input files into your memory layout.
3606
3607@menu
3608* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3609* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3610* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3611* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3612* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3613@end menu
3614
3615@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3616@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3617@cindex input section basics
3618An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3619by a list of section names in parentheses.
3620
3621The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3622describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3623
3624The most common input section description is to include all input
3625sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3626include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3627@smallexample
3628*(.text)
3629@end smallexample
3630@noindent
18625d54
CM
3631Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3632of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3633match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3634example:
252b5132 3635@smallexample
b4346c09 3636*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3637@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3638will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3639@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3640
3641There are two ways to include more than one section:
3642@smallexample
3643*(.text .rdata)
3644*(.text) *(.rdata)
3645@end smallexample
3646@noindent
3647The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3648@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3649first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3650they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3651@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3652@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3653
3654You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3655You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3656needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3657@smallexample
3658data.o(.data)
3659@end smallexample
3660
967928e9
AM
3661You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3662matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3663with no whitespace around the colon.
3664
3665@table @samp
3666@item archive:file
3667matches file within archive
3668@item archive:
3669matches the whole archive
3670@item :file
3671matches file but not one in an archive
3672@end table
3673
3674Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3675wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3676single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3677@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3678within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3679also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3680other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3681from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3682command.
3683
252b5132
RH
3684If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3685the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3686commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3687@smallexample
3688data.o
3689@end smallexample
3690
967928e9
AM
3691When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3692and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3693characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3694name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3695did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3696though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3697@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3698the archive search path.
3699
3700@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3701@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3702@cindex input section wildcards
3703@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3704@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3705@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3706In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3707name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3708
3709The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3710pattern for the file name.
3711
3712The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3713
3714@table @samp
3715@item *
3716matches any number of characters
3717@item ?
3718matches any single character
3719@item [@var{chars}]
3720matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3721character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3722@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3723@item \
3724quotes the following character
3725@end table
3726
3727When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3728will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3729Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3730exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3731@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3732a @samp{/} character.
3733
3734File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3735specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3736does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3737
3738If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3739appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3740will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3741sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3742@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3743@smallexample
3744.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3745.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3746@end smallexample
3747
bcaa7b3e 3748@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3749Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3750in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3751this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3752pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3753@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3754into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3755
bcaa7b3e
L
3756@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3757@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3758difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3759ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3760
3761@cindex SORT
3762@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3763
3764When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3765can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3766
3767@enumerate
3768@item
3769@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3770It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3771sections have the same name.
3772@item
3773@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3774It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3775sections have the same alignment.
3776@item
c0065db7 3777@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3778treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3779@item
3780@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3781is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3782@item
3783All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3784@end enumerate
3785
3786When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3787section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3788takes precedence over the command line option.
3789
3790If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3791command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3792treated as nested sorting command.
3793
3794@enumerate
3795@item
3796@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3797@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3798@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3799@item
3800@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3801@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3802@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3803@end enumerate
3804
3805If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3806command line option will be ignored.
3807
252b5132
RH
3808If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3809@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3810precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3811
3812This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3813files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3814sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3815The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3816with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3817linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3818@smallexample
3819@group
3820SECTIONS @{
3821 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3822 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3823 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3824 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3825@}
3826@end group
3827@end smallexample
3828
3829@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3830@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3831@cindex common symbol placement
3832@cindex uninitialized data placement
3833A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3834file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3835linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3836named @samp{COMMON}.
3837
3838You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3839other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3840particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3841input files are placed in another section.
3842
3843In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3844@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3845@smallexample
3846.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3847@end smallexample
3848
3849@cindex scommon section
3850@cindex small common symbols
3851Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3852example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3853symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3854different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3855the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3856symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3857to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3858locations.
3859
3860@cindex [COMMON]
3861You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3862notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3863@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3864
3865@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3866@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3867@cindex KEEP
3868@cindex garbage collection
3869When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3870it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3871This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3872with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3873@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3874
3875@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3876@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3877The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3878to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3879start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3880@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3881follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3882@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3883@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3884All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3885files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3886
3887@smallexample
3888@group
3889SECTIONS @{
3890 outputa 0x10000 :
3891 @{
3892 all.o
3893 foo.o (.input1)
3894 @}
36f63dca
NC
3895@end group
3896@group
252b5132
RH
3897 outputb :
3898 @{
3899 foo.o (.input2)
3900 foo1.o (.input1)
3901 @}
36f63dca
NC
3902@end group
3903@group
252b5132
RH
3904 outputc :
3905 @{
3906 *(.input1)
3907 *(.input2)
3908 @}
3909@}
3910@end group
a1ab1d2a 3911@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3912
3913@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3914@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3915@cindex data
3916@cindex section data
3917@cindex output section data
3918@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3919@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3920@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3921@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3922@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3923You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3924@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3925an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3926parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3927value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3928counter.
3929
3930The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3931store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3932bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3933stored.
3934
3935For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3936of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3937@smallexample
3938BYTE(1)
3939LONG(addr)
3940@end smallexample
3941
3942When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3943same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3944target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3945@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3946@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3947
3948If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3949which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3950When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3951true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3952endianness of the first input object file.
3953
36f63dca 3954Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3955between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3956@smallexample
3957SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3958@end smallexample
3959whereas this will work:
3960@smallexample
3961SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3962@end smallexample
3963
252b5132
RH
3964@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3965@cindex holes, filling
3966@cindex unspecified memory
3967You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3968current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3969otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3970gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3971with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3972necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3973point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3974than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3975different parts of an output section.
3976
3977This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3978value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3979@smallexample
563e308f 3980FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3981@end smallexample
3982
3983The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3984section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3985part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3986entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3987precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3988expression.
252b5132
RH
3989
3990@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3991@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3992There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3993commands.
3994
3995@table @code
3996@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3997@cindex input filename symbols
3998@cindex filename symbols
3999@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4000The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4001The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4002file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4003the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4004
4005This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4006normally used for any other object file format.
4007
4008@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4009@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4010@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4011@item CONSTRUCTORS
4012When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4013unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4014destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4015arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4016automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4017For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4018linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4019@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4020ignored for other object file formats.
4021
4022The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4023constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4024Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4025the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4026first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4027of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4028compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4029formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4030@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4031the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4032destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4033@code{exit}.
4034
4035For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4036arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4037addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4038and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4039linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4040runtime code expects to see.
4041
4042@smallexample
4043 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4044 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4045 *(.ctors)
4046 LONG(0)
4047 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4048 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4049 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4050 *(.dtors)
4051 LONG(0)
4052 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4053@end smallexample
4054
4055If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4056which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4057are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4058are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4059command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4060@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4061@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4062@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4063
4064Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4065and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4066need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4067scripts.
4068
4069@end table
4070
4071@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4072@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4073@cindex discarding sections
4074@cindex sections, discarding
4075@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4076The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4077for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4078be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4079@smallexample
49c13adb 4080.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4081@end smallexample
4082@noindent
4083will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4084@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4085sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4086space in an output section will also create the output section.
4087
a0976ea4 4088The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4089on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4090symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4091the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4092section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4093
4094@cindex /DISCARD/
4095The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4096input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4097section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4098
4099@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4100@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4101@cindex output section attributes
4102We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4103like this:
4104@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4105@group
7e7d5768 4106@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 4107 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
4108 @{
4109 @var{output-section-command}
4110 @var{output-section-command}
4111 @dots{}
562d3460 4112 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4113@end group
4114@end smallexample
4115We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4116@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4117remaining section attributes.
4118
a1ab1d2a 4119@menu
252b5132
RH
4120* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4121* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4122* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4123* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
4124* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4125* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4126* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4127@end menu
4128
4129@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4130@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4131Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4132parentheses. The following types are defined:
4133
4134@table @code
4135@item NOLOAD
4136The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4137loaded into memory when the program is run.
4138@item DSECT
4139@itemx COPY
4140@itemx INFO
4141@itemx OVERLAY
4142These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4143rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4144marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4145section when the program is run.
4146@end table
4147
4148@kindex NOLOAD
4149@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4150@cindex loading, preventing
4151The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4152the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4153the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4154@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4155need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4156@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4157@smallexample
4158@group
4159SECTIONS @{
4160 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4161 @dots{}
4162@}
4163@end group
4164@end smallexample
4165
4166@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4167@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4168@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4169@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4170@cindex load address
4171@cindex section load address
4172Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4173@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4174an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4175Address}).
4176
dc0b6aa0
AM
4177The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4178the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4179
4180Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4181specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4182Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4183linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4184
4185If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4186section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4187VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4188section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4189or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4190to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4191@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4192
4193@cindex ROM initialized data
4194@cindex initialized data in ROM
4195This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4196example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4197called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4198@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4199even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4200uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4201defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4202counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4203
4204@smallexample
4205@group
4206SECTIONS
4207 @{
4208 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4209 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4210 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4211 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4212 .bss 0x3000 :
4213 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4214@}
4215@end group
4216@end smallexample
4217
4218The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4219this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4220the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4221how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4222script.
4223
4224@smallexample
4225@group
4226extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4227char *src = &_etext;
4228char *dst = &_data;
4229
4230/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4231while (dst < &_edata) @{
4232 *dst++ = *src++;
4233@}
4234
4235/* Zero bss */
4236for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4237 *dst = 0;
4238@end group
4239@end smallexample
4240
bbf115d3
L
4241@node Forced Output Alignment
4242@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4243@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4244@cindex forcing output section alignment
4245@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4246You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4247
7e7d5768
AM
4248@node Forced Input Alignment
4249@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4250@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4251@cindex forcing input section alignment
4252@cindex input section alignment
4253You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4254SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4255sections, whether larger or smaller.
4256
252b5132 4257@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4258@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4259@kindex >@var{region}
4260@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4261@cindex memory regions and sections
4262You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4263using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4264
4265Here is a simple example:
4266@smallexample
4267@group
4268MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4269SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4270@end group
4271@end smallexample
4272
4273@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4274@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4275@kindex :@var{phdr}
4276@cindex section, assigning to program header
4277@cindex program headers and sections
4278You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4279using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4280one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4281assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4282@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4283linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4284
4285Here is a simple example:
4286@smallexample
4287@group
4288PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4289SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4290@end group
4291@end smallexample
4292
4293@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4294@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4295@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4296@cindex section fill pattern
4297@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4298You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4299@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4300(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4301within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4302alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4303necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4304of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4305an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4306fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4307other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4308pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4309expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4310
4311You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4312output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4313
4314Here is a simple example:
4315@smallexample
4316@group
563e308f 4317SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4318@end group
4319@end smallexample
4320
4321@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4322@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4323@kindex OVERLAY
4324@cindex overlays
4325An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4326are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4327the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4328copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4329required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4330can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4331than another.
4332
4333Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4334@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4335output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4336command is as follows:
4337@smallexample
4338@group
4339OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4340 @{
4341 @var{secname1}
4342 @{
4343 @var{output-section-command}
4344 @var{output-section-command}
4345 @dots{}
4346 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4347 @var{secname2}
4348 @{
4349 @var{output-section-command}
4350 @var{output-section-command}
4351 @dots{}
4352 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4353 @dots{}
4354 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4355@end group
4356@end smallexample
4357
4358Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4359section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4360section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4361those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4362except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4363sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4364
4365The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4366addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4367memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4368whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4369and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4370and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4371
4372If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4373among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4374all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4375section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4376NOCROSSREFS}.
4377
4378For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4379provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4380defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4381@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4382the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4383within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4384symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4385
4386At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4387the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4388
4389Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4390@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4391@smallexample
4392@group
4393 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4394 @{
4395 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4396 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4397 @}
4398@end group
4399@end smallexample
4400@noindent
4401This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4402address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4403@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4404following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4405@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4406@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4407
4408C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4409like the following.
4410
4411@smallexample
4412@group
4413 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4414 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4415 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4416@end group
4417@end smallexample
4418
4419Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4420everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4421example could have been written identically as follows.
4422
4423@smallexample
4424@group
4425 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4426 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4427 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4428 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4429 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4430 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4431 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4432@end group
4433@end smallexample
4434
4435@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4436@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4437@kindex MEMORY
4438@cindex memory regions
4439@cindex regions of memory
4440@cindex allocating memory
4441@cindex discontinuous memory
4442The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4443memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4444
4445The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4446memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4447may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4448can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4449set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4450regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4451around to fit into the available regions.
4452
4453A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4454command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4455you wish. The syntax is:
4456@smallexample
4457@group
a1ab1d2a 4458MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4459 @{
4460 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4461 @dots{}
4462 @}
4463@end group
4464@end smallexample
4465
4466The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4467region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4468Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4469with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4470must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4471add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4472command.
252b5132
RH
4473
4474@cindex memory region attributes
4475The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4476whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4477not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4478@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4479section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4480the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4481them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4482
4483The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4484@table @samp
4485@item R
4486Read-only section
4487@item W
4488Read/write section
4489@item X
4490Executable section
4491@item A
4492Allocatable section
4493@item I
4494Initialized section
4495@item L
4496Same as @samp{I}
4497@item !
4498Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4499@end table
4500
4501If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4502@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4503attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4504in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4505attributes.
4506
4507@kindex ORIGIN =
4508@kindex o =
4509@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4510The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4511the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4512cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4513abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4514@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4515
4516@kindex LENGTH =
4517@kindex len =
4518@kindex l =
4519The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4520region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4521be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4522@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4523
4524In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4525available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4526and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4527linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4528is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4529or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4530explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4531region.
4532
4533@smallexample
4534@group
a1ab1d2a 4535MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4536 @{
4537 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4538 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4539 @}
4540@end group
4541@end smallexample
4542
4543Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4544specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4545@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4546a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4547output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4548was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4549the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4550output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4551region, the linker will issue an error message.
4552
3ec57632 4553It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4554expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4555@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4556
4557@smallexample
4558@group
c0065db7 4559 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4560@end group
4561@end smallexample
4562
252b5132
RH
4563@node PHDRS
4564@section PHDRS Command
4565@kindex PHDRS
4566@cindex program headers
4567@cindex ELF program headers
4568@cindex program segments
4569@cindex segments, ELF
4570The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4571@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4572loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4573program with the @samp{-p} option.
4574
4575When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4576reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4577program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4578This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4579interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4580
4581The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4582in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4583precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4584the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4585not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4586
4587The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4588generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4589ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4590
4591This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4592@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4593
4594@smallexample
4595@group
4596PHDRS
4597@{
4598 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4599 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4600@}
4601@end group
4602@end smallexample
4603
4604The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4605of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4606header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4607with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4608must have a distinct name.
4609
4610Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4611system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4612specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4613sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4614attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4615Section Phdr}.
4616
4617It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4618merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4619repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4620contain the section.
4621
4622If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4623then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4624not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4625convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4626placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4627default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4628segment at all.
4629
4630@kindex FILEHDR
4631@kindex PHDRS
4632You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4633the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4634The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4635file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4636include the ELF program headers themselves.
4637
4638The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4639value of the keyword.
4640
4641@table @asis
4642@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4643Indicates an unused program header.
4644
4645@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4646Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4647the file.
4648
4649@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4650Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4651
4652@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4653Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4654found.
4655
4656@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4657Indicates a segment holding note information.
4658
4659@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4660A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4661ABI.
4662
4663@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4664Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4665
4666@item @var{expression}
4667An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4668be used for types not defined above.
4669@end table
4670
4671You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4672in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4673@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4674Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4675output section attribute.
4676
4677The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4678which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4679explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4680an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4681header.
4682
4683Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4684headers used on a native ELF system.
4685
4686@example
4687@group
4688PHDRS
4689@{
4690 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4691 interp PT_INTERP ;
4692 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4693 data PT_LOAD ;
4694 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4695@}
4696
4697SECTIONS
4698@{
4699 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4700 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4701 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4702 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4703 @dots{}
4704 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4705 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4706 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4707 @dots{}
4708@}
4709@end group
4710@end example
4711
4712@node VERSION
4713@section VERSION Command
4714@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4715@cindex symbol versions
4716@cindex version script
4717@cindex versions of symbols
4718The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4719only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4720symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4721a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4722shared library.
4723
4724You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4725you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4726also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4727
4728The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4729@smallexample
4730VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4731@end smallexample
4732
4733The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4734Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4735version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4736version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4737version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4738scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4739library.
4740
4741The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4742examples.
4743
4744@smallexample
4745VERS_1.1 @{
4746 global:
4747 foo1;
4748 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4749 old*;
4750 original*;
4751 new*;
252b5132
RH
4752@};
4753
4754VERS_1.2 @{
4755 foo2;
4756@} VERS_1.1;
4757
4758VERS_2.0 @{
4759 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4760 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4761 ns::*;
4762 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4763 @}
252b5132
RH
4764@} VERS_1.2;
4765@end smallexample
4766
4767This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4768version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4769The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4770a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4771of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4772symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4773is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4774in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4775However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4776name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4777
4778Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4779depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4780to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4781
4782Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4783depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4784and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4785
4786When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4787specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4788unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4789unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4790somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4791wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4792wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4793set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4794ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4795
4796The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4797they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4798could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4799However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4800
0f6bf451 4801Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4802in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4803symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4804won't.
4805
4806@smallexample
7c9c73be 4807@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4808@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4809
252b5132
RH
4810When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4811symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4812requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4813shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4814loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4815linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4816application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4817way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4818all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4819search for each symbol reference.
4820
4821The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4822doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4823that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4824functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4825the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4826required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4827that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4828versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4829the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4830
4831There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4832first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4833source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4834script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4835maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4836@smallexample
4837__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4838@end smallexample
4839@noindent
4840in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4841be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4842The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4843@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4844takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4845
4846The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4847function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4848an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4849version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4850linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4851
4852To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4853source file. Here is an example:
4854
4855@smallexample
4856__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4857__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4858__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4859__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4860@end smallexample
4861
4862In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4863unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4864example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4865@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4866
4867When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4868some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4869this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4870@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4871declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4872you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4873
4874If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4875within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4876(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4877specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4878
cb840a31
L
4879You can also specify the language in the version script:
4880
4881@smallexample
4882VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4883@end smallexample
4884
c0065db7 4885The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4886The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4887demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4888patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4889
86043bbb
MM
4890Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4891described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4892or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4893the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4894whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4895cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4896might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4897should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4898expect when you upgrade.
4899
252b5132
RH
4900@node Expressions
4901@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4902@cindex expressions
4903@cindex arithmetic
4904The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4905that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4906expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4907host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4908
4909You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4910
4911The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4912expressions.
4913
4914@menu
4915* Constants:: Constants
4916* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4917* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4918* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4919* Operators:: Operators
4920* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4921* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4922* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4923@end menu
4924
4925@node Constants
4926@subsection Constants
4927@cindex integer notation
4928@cindex constants in linker scripts
4929All constants are integers.
4930
4931As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4932octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4933hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4934@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4935@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4936value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4937
4938@cindex scaled integers
4939@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4940@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4941@cindex suffixes for integers
4942@cindex integer suffixes
4943In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4944constant by
4945@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4946@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4947@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4948@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4949@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4950@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4951@tex
4952${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4953@end tex
4954@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
4955respectively. For example, the following
4956all refer to the same quantity:
4957
252b5132 4958@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4959_fourk_1 = 4K;
4960_fourk_2 = 4096;
4961_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 4962_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
4963@end smallexample
4964
8a308ae8
NC
4965Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
4966conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
4967
252b5132
RH
4968@node Symbols
4969@subsection Symbol Names
4970@cindex symbol names
4971@cindex names
4972@cindex quoted symbol names
4973@kindex "
4974Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4975and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4976Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4977specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4978keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4979@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4980"SECTION" = 9;
4981"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4982@end smallexample
4983
4984Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4985to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4986whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4987
ecca9871
L
4988@node Orphan Sections
4989@subsection Orphan Sections
4990@cindex orphan
4991Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4992are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4993script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4994output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4995placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4996attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4997same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4998If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4999at the end of the file.
5000
5001For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5002well as section flag.
5003
41911f68 5004If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5005the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5006__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5007section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5008orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5009representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5010character.
5011
252b5132
RH
5012@node Location Counter
5013@subsection The Location Counter
5014@kindex .
5015@cindex dot
5016@cindex location counter
5017@cindex current output location
5018The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5019current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5020location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5021within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5022anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5023
5024@cindex holes
5025Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5026moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5027location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5028and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5029doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5030
5031@smallexample
5032SECTIONS
5033@{
5034 output :
5035 @{
5036 file1(.text)
5037 . = . + 1000;
5038 file2(.text)
5039 . += 1000;
5040 file3(.text)
563e308f 5041 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5042@}
5043@end smallexample
5044@noindent
5045In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5046located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5047followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5048@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5049@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5050specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5051
5c6bbab8
NC
5052@cindex dot inside sections
5053Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5054current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5055statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5056absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5057however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5058not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5059
5060@smallexample
5061SECTIONS
5062@{
5063 . = 0x100
5064 .text: @{
5065 *(.text)
5066 . = 0x200
5067 @}
5068 . = 0x500
5069 .data: @{
5070 *(.data)
5071 . += 0x600
5072 @}
5073@}
5074@end smallexample
5075
5076The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5077and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5078the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5079much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5080move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5081and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5082the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5083the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5084
b5666f2f
AM
5085@cindex dot outside sections
5086Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5087output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5088needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5089
5090@smallexample
5091SECTIONS
5092@{
5093 start_of_text = . ;
5094 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5095 end_of_text = . ;
5096
5097 start_of_data = . ;
5098 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5099 end_of_data = . ;
5100@}
5101@end smallexample
5102
5103If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5104not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5105between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5106should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5107blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5108the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5109sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5110statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5111special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5112place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5113as follows:
5114
5115@smallexample
5116SECTIONS
5117@{
5118 start_of_text = . ;
5119 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5120 end_of_text = . ;
5121
5122 start_of_data = . ;
5123 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5124 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5125 end_of_data = . ;
5126@}
5127@end smallexample
5128
5129This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5130@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5131placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5132assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5133a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5134section. So you could write:
5135
5136@smallexample
5137SECTIONS
5138@{
5139 start_of_text = . ;
5140 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5141 end_of_text = . ;
5142
5143 . = . ;
5144 start_of_data = . ;
5145 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5146 end_of_data = . ;
5147@}
5148@end smallexample
5149
5150Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5151@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5152
252b5132
RH
5153@need 2000
5154@node Operators
5155@subsection Operators
5156@cindex operators for arithmetic
5157@cindex arithmetic operators
5158@cindex precedence in expressions
5159The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5160the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5161@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5162@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5163@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5164@smallexample
5165precedence associativity Operators Notes
5166(highest)
51671 left ! - ~ (1)
51682 left * / %
51693 left + -
51704 left >> <<
51715 left == != > < <= >=
51726 left &
51737 left |
51748 left &&
51759 left ||
517610 right ? :
517711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5178(lowest)
5179@end smallexample
5180Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5181(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5182(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5183@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5185@tex
5186\vskip \baselineskip
5187%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5188\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5189\hrule
5190\halign
5191{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5192height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5193&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5194height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5195\noalign{\hrule}
5196height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5197&highest&&&&&\cr
5198% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5199&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5200&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5201&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5202&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5203&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5204&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5205&7&&left&&|&\cr
5206&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5207&9&&left&&||&\cr
5208&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5209&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5210&lowest&&&&&\cr
5211height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5212\hrule}
5213@end tex
5214@iftex
5215{
5216@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5217@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5218@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5219}
5220@end iftex
5221@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5222
5223@node Evaluation
5224@subsection Evaluation
5225@cindex lazy evaluation
5226@cindex expression evaluation order
5227The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5228an expression when absolutely necessary.
5229
5230The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5231address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5232regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5233as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5234
5235However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5236until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5237other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5238for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5239
5240The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5241assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5242allocation.
5243
5244Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5245@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5246
5247If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5248available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5249following
5250@smallexample
5251@group
5252SECTIONS
5253 @{
a1ab1d2a 5254 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5255 @{ *(.text) @}
5256 @}
5257@end group
5258@end smallexample
5259@noindent
5260will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5261address}.
5262
5263@node Expression Section
5264@subsection The Section of an Expression
5265@cindex expression sections
5266@cindex absolute expressions
5267@cindex relative expressions
5268@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5269@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5270@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5271When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5272or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5273fixed offset from the base of a section.
5274
5275The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5276whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5277an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5278section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5279
5280A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5281relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5282further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5283section will be the section of the relative expression.
5284
5285A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5286through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5287will not have any particular associated section.
5288
5289You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5290to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5291create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5292section @samp{.data}:
5293@smallexample
5294SECTIONS
5295 @{
5296 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5297 @}
5298@end smallexample
5299@noindent
5300If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5301@samp{.data} section.
5302
5303@node Builtin Functions
5304@subsection Builtin Functions
5305@cindex functions in expressions
5306The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5307use in linker script expressions.
5308
5309@table @code
5310@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5311@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5312@cindex expression, absolute
5313Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5314of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5315value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5316normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5317
5318@item ADDR(@var{section})
5319@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5320@cindex section address in expression
5321Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5322script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5323the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5324identical values:
5325@smallexample
5326@group
5327SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5328 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5329 @{
252b5132
RH
5330 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5331 @dots{}
5332 @}
5333 .output :
5334 @{
5335 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5336 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5337 @}
5338@dots{} @}
5339@end group
5340@end smallexample
5341
876f4090
NS
5342@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5343@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5344@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5345@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5346@cindex round up location counter
5347@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5348@cindex round up expression
5349@cindex align expression
5350Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5351to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5352doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5353arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5354expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5355equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5356
5357Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5358next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5359variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5360input sections:
252b5132
RH
5361@smallexample
5362@group
5363SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5364 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5365 *(.data)
5366 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5367 @}
5368@dots{} @}
5369@end group
5370@end smallexample
5371@noindent
5372The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5373a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5374a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5375of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5376
5377The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5378
362c1d1a
NS
5379@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5380@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5381@cindex section alignment
5382Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5383been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5384evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5385the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5386value in that section.
5387@smallexample
5388@group
5389SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5390 .output @{
5391 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5392 @dots{}
5393 @}
5394@dots{} @}
5395@end group
5396@end smallexample
5397
252b5132
RH
5398@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5399@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5400This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5401scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5402section.
5403
2d20f7bf
JJ
5404@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5405@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5406This is equivalent to either
5407@smallexample
5408(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5409@end smallexample
5410or
5411@smallexample
5412(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5413@end smallexample
5414@noindent
5415depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5416for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5417@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5418If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5419memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5420bytes in the on-disk file.
5421
5422This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5423any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5424@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5425be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5426working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5427
5428@noindent
5429Example:
5430@smallexample
5431 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5432@end smallexample
5433
5434@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5435@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5436This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5437evaluation purposes.
5438
5439@smallexample
5440 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5441@end smallexample
5442
a4f5ad88
JJ
5443@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5444@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5445This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5446@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5447When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5448does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5449@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5450boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5451it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5452@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5453
5454@smallexample
5455 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5456@end smallexample
5457
252b5132
RH
5458@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5459@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5460@cindex symbol defaults
5461Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5462defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5463return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5464default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5465shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5466the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5467existed, its value is preserved:
5468
5469@smallexample
5470@group
5471SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5472 .text : @{
5473 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5474 @dots{}
5475 @}
5476 @dots{}
5477@}
5478@end group
5479@end smallexample
5480
3ec57632
NC
5481@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5482@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5483Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5484
252b5132
RH
5485@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5486@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5487@cindex section load address in expression
5488Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5489the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5490attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5491Section LMA}).
5492
5493@kindex MAX
5494@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5495Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5496
5497@kindex MIN
5498@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5499Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5500
5501@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5502@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5503@cindex unallocated address, next
5504Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5505This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5506use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5507output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5508
3ec57632
NC
5509@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5510@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5511Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5512
ba916c8a
MM
5513@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5514@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5515Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5516value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5517option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5518@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5519be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5520``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5521name.
5522
252b5132
RH
5523@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5524@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5525@cindex section size
5526Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5527been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5528evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5529@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5530@smallexample
5531@group
5532SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5533 .output @{
5534 .start = . ;
5535 @dots{}
5536 .end = . ;
5537 @}
5538 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5539 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5540@dots{} @}
5541@end group
5542@end smallexample
5543
5544@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5545@itemx sizeof_headers
5546@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5547@cindex header size
5548Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5549information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5550this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5551choose, to facilitate paging.
5552
5553@cindex not enough room for program headers
5554@cindex program headers, not enough room
5555When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5556@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5557number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5558addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5559additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5560room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5561the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5562script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5563you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5564command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5565@end table
5566
5567@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5568@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5569@cindex implicit linker scripts
5570If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5571an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5572linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5573linker will report an error.
5574
5575An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5576
5577Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5578assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5579commands.
5580
5581Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5582at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5583read. This can affect archive searching.
5584
5585@ifset GENERIC
5586@node Machine Dependent
5587@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5588
5589@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5590@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5591sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5592functionality are not listed.
5593
5594@menu
36f63dca
NC
5595@ifset H8300
5596* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5597@end ifset
5598@ifset I960
5599* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5600@end ifset
5601@ifset ARM
5602* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5603@end ifset
5604@ifset HPPA
5605* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5606@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5607@ifset M68K
5608* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5609@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5610@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5611* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5612@end ifset
2469cfa2 5613@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5614* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5615@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5616@ifset M68HC11
5617* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5618@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5619@ifset POWERPC
5620* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5621@end ifset
5622@ifset POWERPC64
5623* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5624@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5625@ifset SPU
5626* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5627@end ifset
74459f0e 5628@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5629* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5630@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5631@ifset WIN32
5632* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5633@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5634@ifset XTENSA
5635* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5636@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5637@end menu
5638@end ifset
5639
252b5132
RH
5640@ifset H8300
5641@ifclear GENERIC
5642@raisesections
5643@end ifclear
5644
5645@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5646@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5647
5648@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5649For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5650you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5651
5652@table @emph
5653@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5654@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5655@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5656targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5657program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5658respectively.
5659
5660@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5661@item synthesizing instructions
5662@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5663@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5664sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5665page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5666(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5667@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5668top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5669
5670@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5671@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5672biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5673which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5674page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5675(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5676@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5677the top page of memory).
5678
5679@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5680@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
568132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5682changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5683(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5684@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5685the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5686@end table
5687
5688@ifclear GENERIC
5689@lowersections
5690@end ifclear
5691@end ifset
5692
36f63dca 5693@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5694@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5695@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5696@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5697@node Renesas
5698@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5699
c2dcd04e
NC
5700@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5701H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5702options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5703@end ifset
5704@end ifclear
5705
5706@ifset I960
5707@ifclear GENERIC
5708@raisesections
5709@end ifclear
5710
5711@node i960
5712@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5713
5714@cindex i960 support
5715
5716You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5717specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5718family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5719incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5720linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5721libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5722search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5723
5724For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5725well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5726paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5727the names
5728
5729@smallexample
5730@group
5731try
5732libtry.a
5733tryca
5734libtryca.a
5735@end group
5736@end smallexample
5737
5738@noindent
5739The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5740two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5741
5742You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5743the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5744use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5745specifies a library.
5746
5747@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5748@cindex relaxing on i960
5749@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5750you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5751@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5752them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5753instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5754instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5755target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5756not itself call any subroutines).
5757
5758@ifclear GENERIC
5759@lowersections
5760@end ifclear
5761@end ifset
5762
5763@ifset ARM
5764@ifclear GENERIC
5765@raisesections
5766@end ifclear
5767
93fd0973
SC
5768@ifset M68HC11
5769@ifclear GENERIC
5770@raisesections
5771@end ifclear
5772
5773@node M68HC11/68HC12
5774@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5775
5776@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5777
5778@subsection Linker Relaxation
5779
5780For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5781optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5782
5783@table @emph
5784@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5785@item relaxing address modes
5786@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5787targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5788program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5789respectively.
5790
5791@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5792transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5793page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5794
5795@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5796When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5797of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5798addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5799@code{bset} instructions.
5800
5801@end table
5802
5803@subsection Trampoline Generation
5804
5805@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5806@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5807For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5808call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5809will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5810trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5811case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5812point to the function trampoline.
5813
5814@ifclear GENERIC
5815@lowersections
5816@end ifclear
5817@end ifset
5818
36f63dca 5819@node ARM
3674e28a 5820@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5821
5822@cindex ARM interworking support
5823@kindex --support-old-code
5824For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5825between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5826been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5827line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5828libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5829option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5830given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5831which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5832the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5833non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5834
5835@cindex thumb entry point
5836@cindex entry point, thumb
5837@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5838The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5839@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5840But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5841branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5842executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5843
ce11ba6c
KT
5844@cindex PE import table prefixing
5845@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5846The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5847the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5848elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5849import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5850
e489d0ae
PB
5851@cindex BE8
5852@kindex --be8
5853The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5854executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5855The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5856
3674e28a
PB
5857@cindex TARGET1
5858@kindex --target1-rel
5859@kindex --target1-abs
5860The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5861@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5862or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5863and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5864
5865@cindex TARGET2
5866@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5867The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5868@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5869meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5870@table @samp
5871@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5872@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5873@item abs
5874@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5875@item got-rel
5876@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5877@end table
5878
319850b4
JB
5879@cindex FIX_V4BX
5880@kindex --fix-v4bx
5881The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5882specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5883interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5884also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5885
5886In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5887linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5888@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5889
5890In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5891relocations are ignored.
5892
845b51d6
PB
5893@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5894@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5895Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5896relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5897
5898@smallexample
5899TST rM, #1
5900MOVEQ PC, rM
5901BX Rn
5902@end smallexample
5903
5904This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5905and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5906condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5907
33bfe774
JB
5908@cindex USE_BLX
5909@kindex --use-blx
5910The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5911BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5912situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5913code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5914each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5915
5916This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5917specify it if you are using that target.
5918
c6dd86c6
JB
5919@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5920@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5921The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5922bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5923instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5924to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5925the support code can read the intended values.
5926
5927The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5928intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5929and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5930intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5931full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5932you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5933
5934If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5935enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5936@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5937mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5938vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5939@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5940
5941If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5942potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5943such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5944first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5945instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5946the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5947are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5948
bf21ed78
MS
5949@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5950@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5951The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5952warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5953enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5954linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5955using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5956not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5957
5958@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5959@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5960The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5961warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5962@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5963linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5964using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5965
726150b7
NC
5966@cindex PIC_VENEER
5967@kindex --pic-veneer
5968The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5969ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5970is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5971@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5972
5973@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5974@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5975The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5976code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5977perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5978placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5979controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5980The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5981duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5982group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5983code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5984where they should be placed.
5985
5986The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5987@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 5988placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
5989branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5990placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5991value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5992exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5993A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5994linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5995from the input sections.
5996
5997The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5998@samp{N = +1}.
5999
1a51c1a4
NC
6000Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6001only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6002otherwise.
6003
36f63dca
NC
6004@ifclear GENERIC
6005@lowersections
6006@end ifclear
6007@end ifset
6008
6009@ifset HPPA
6010@ifclear GENERIC
6011@raisesections
6012@end ifclear
6013
6014@node HPPA ELF32
6015@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6016@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6017@kindex --multi-subspace
6018When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6019import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6020The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6021stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6022multiple sub-spaces.
6023
6024@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6025@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6026Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6027stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6028@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6029sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6030a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6031the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6032conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6033prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6034A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6035branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6036@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6037@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6038detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6039positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6040
6041Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6042single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6043create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6044large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6045
6046@ifclear GENERIC
6047@lowersections
6048@end ifclear
6049@end ifset
6050
7fb9f789
NC
6051@ifset M68K
6052@ifclear GENERIC
6053@raisesections
6054@end ifclear
6055
6056@node M68K
6057@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6058
6059@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6060@kindex --got=@var{type}
6061The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6062The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6063@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6064the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6065@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6066entries only at non-negative offsets.
6067@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6068entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6069support such GOTs.
6070@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6071output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6072file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6073files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6074
6075@ifclear GENERIC
6076@lowersections
6077@end ifclear
6078@end ifset
6079
36f63dca
NC
6080@ifset MMIX
6081@ifclear GENERIC
6082@raisesections
6083@end ifclear
6084
6085@node MMIX
6086@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6087For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6088@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6089understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6090can translate between the two formats.
6091
6092There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6093Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6094registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6095equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6096@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6097global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6098this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6099symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6100
7a2de473
HPN
6101Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6102@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6103The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6104of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6105
6106Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6107are left out from an mmo file.
6108
6109@ifclear GENERIC
6110@lowersections
6111@end ifclear
6112@end ifset
6113
6114@ifset MSP430
6115@ifclear GENERIC
6116@raisesections
6117@end ifclear
6118
6119@node MSP430
6120@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6121For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6122will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6123just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6124
6125@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6126The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6127
6128@table @code
6129@item @samp{.vectors}
6130Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6131
6132@item @samp{.bootloader}
6133Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6134in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6135
6136@item @samp{.infomem}
6137Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6138this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6139
c0065db7 6140@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6141This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6142in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6143
6144@item @samp{.noinit}
6145Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6146
c0065db7 6147The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6148@end table
6149
6150@ifclear GENERIC
6151@lowersections
6152@end ifclear
6153@end ifset
6154
2a60a7a8
AM
6155@ifset POWERPC
6156@ifclear GENERIC
6157@raisesections
6158@end ifclear
6159
6160@node PowerPC ELF32
6161@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6162@cindex PowerPC long branches
6163@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6164Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6165displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6166@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6167@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6168the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6169section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6170section exceeds 33M in size.
6171
6172@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6173@table @option
6174@cindex PowerPC PLT
6175@kindex --bss-plt
6176@item --bss-plt
6177Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6178generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6179the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6180writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6181@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6182PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6183compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6184BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6185
016687f8
AM
6186@kindex --secure-plt
6187@item --secure-plt
6188@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6189@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6190when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6191layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6192style BSS PLT.
6193
2a60a7a8
AM
6194@cindex PowerPC GOT
6195@kindex --sdata-got
6196@item --sdata-got
6197The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6198sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6199@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6200section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6201@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6202@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6203@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6204@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6205PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6206pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6207GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6208really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6209
6210@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6211@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6212@item --emit-stub-syms
6213This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6214symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6215
6216@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6217@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6218@item --no-tls-optimize
6219PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6220sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6221disable the optimization.
6222@end table
6223
6224@ifclear GENERIC
6225@lowersections
6226@end ifclear
6227@end ifset
6228
6229@ifset POWERPC64
6230@ifclear GENERIC
6231@raisesections
6232@end ifclear
6233
6234@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6235@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6236
6237@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6238@table @option
6239@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6240@kindex --stub-group-size
6241@item --stub-group-size
6242Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6243by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6244@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6245sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6246a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6247the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6248conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6249prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6250A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6251branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6252@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6253@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6254detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6255positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6256
6257Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6258single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6259create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6260large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6261
6262@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6263@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6264@item --emit-stub-syms
6265This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6266symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6267
6268@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6269@kindex --dotsyms
6270@kindex --no-dotsyms
6271@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6272These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6273in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6274function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6275code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6276properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6277to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6278@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6279dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6280feature.
6281
6282@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6283@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6284@item --no-tls-optimize
6285PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6286sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6287disable the optimization.
6288
6289@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6290@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6291@item --no-opd-optimize
6292PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6293corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6294the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6295Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6296
6297@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6298@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6299@item --non-overlapping-opd
6300Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6301@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6302the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6303entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6304
6305@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6306@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6307@item --no-toc-optimize
6308PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6309entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6310reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6311marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6312marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6313relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6314unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6315reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6316discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6317reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6318code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6319optimization.
6320
6321@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6322@kindex --no-multi-toc
6323@item --no-multi-toc
6324By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6325entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6326total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6327grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6328TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6329calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6330help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
633164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6332Use this option to turn off this feature.
6333@end table
6334
6335@ifclear GENERIC
6336@lowersections
6337@end ifclear
6338@end ifset
6339
49fa1e15
AM
6340@ifset SPU
6341@ifclear GENERIC
6342@raisesections
6343@end ifclear
6344
6345@node SPU ELF
6346@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6347
6348@cindex SPU ELF options
6349@table @option
6350
6351@cindex SPU plugins
6352@kindex --plugin
6353@item --plugin
6354This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6355
6356@cindex SPU overlays
6357@kindex --no-overlays
6358@item --no-overlays
6359Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6360regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6361@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6362turns off all this special overlay handling.
6363
6364@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6365@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6366@item --emit-stub-syms
6367This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6368symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6369
6370@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6371@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6372@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6373This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6374function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6375on calls to non-overlay regions.
6376
6377@cindex SPU local store size
6378@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6379@item --local-store=lo:hi
6380@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6381the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6382range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6383
c0065db7 6384@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6385@kindex --stack-analysis
6386@item --stack-analysis
6387SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6388unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6389under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6390@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6391@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6392determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6393for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6394for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6395for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6396find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6397and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6398under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6399dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6400is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6401and calls will be given.
6402
c0065db7 6403@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6404@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6405@item --emit-stack-syms
6406This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6407in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6408These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6409functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6410functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6411such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6412The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6413@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6414@end table
6415
6416@ifclear GENERIC
6417@lowersections
6418@end ifclear
6419@end ifset
6420
36f63dca
NC
6421@ifset TICOFF
6422@ifclear GENERIC
6423@raisesections
6424@end ifclear
6425
6426@node TI COFF
6427@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6428@cindex TI COFF versions
6429@kindex --format=@var{version}
6430The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6431TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6432also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6433format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6434header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6435
6436@ifclear GENERIC
6437@lowersections
6438@end ifclear
6439@end ifset
6440
2ca22b03
NC
6441@ifset WIN32
6442@ifclear GENERIC
6443@raisesections
6444@end ifclear
6445
6446@node WIN32
6447@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6448
c0065db7 6449This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6450See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6451command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6452
6453@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6454@cindex import libraries
6455@item import libraries
69da35b5 6456The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6457libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6458regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6459archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6460support for creating such libraries provided with the
6461@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6462
c0065db7
RM
6463@item exporting DLL symbols
6464@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6465The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6466
6467@table @emph
6468@item using auto-export functionality
6469@cindex using auto-export functionality
6470By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6471which is controlled by the following command line options:
6472
0a5d968e
NC
6473@itemize
6474@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6475@item --exclude-symbols
6476@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6477@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6478@end itemize
6479
c0065db7 6480If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6481command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6482if either of the following are true:
6483
6484@itemize
6485@item A DEF file is used.
6486@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6487@end itemize
dc8465bf 6488
c0065db7
RM
6489@item using a DEF file
6490@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6491Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6492an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6493exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6494name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6495command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6496
6497@example
6498gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6499@end example
6500
0a5d968e
NC
6501Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6502@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6503
dc8465bf
NC
6504Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6505
6506@example
4b5bd4e7 6507LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6508
6509EXPORTS
6510foo
6511bar
6512_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6513another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6514var1 DATA
c0065db7 6515@end example
dc8465bf 6516
4b5bd4e7
DS
6517This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6518symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6519alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6520by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6521@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6522@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6523
6b31ad16
DS
6524The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6525name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6526the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6527
b45619c0
NC
6528When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6529library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6530@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6531executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6532
6533With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6534specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6535non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6536
6537If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6538or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6539filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6540
4b5bd4e7
DS
6541The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6542
6543@example
6544EXPORTS
6545 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6546 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6547 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6548@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6549
6550Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6551@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6552@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6553@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6554Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6555@samp{<integer>} alias.
6556
6557The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6558
6559@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6560will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6561by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6562linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6563library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6564
6565@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6566The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6567the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6568@code{*_imp__foo}).
6569
6570@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6571well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6572read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6573variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6574the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6575extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6576application will behave unexpectedly.
6577
6578@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6579it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6580symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6581API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6582the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6583
4b5bd4e7
DS
6584See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6585other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6586
6587@cindex creating a DEF file
6588While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6589with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6590
6591@item Using decorations
6592@cindex Using decorations
6593Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6594itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6595declared as:
6596
6597@example
6598__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6599__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6600@end example
6601
6602All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6603any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6604this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6605the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6606
6607Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6608decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6609instead:
6610
6611@example
6612__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6613__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6614@end example
6615
c0065db7
RM
6616This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6617when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6618variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6619code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6620of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6621omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6622@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6623information.
c0065db7 6624@end table
dc8465bf 6625
2ca22b03
NC
6626@cindex automatic data imports
6627@item automatic data imports
6628The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6629by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6630compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6631issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6632code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6633c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6634initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6635decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6636platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6637command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6638The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6639suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6640trigger the feature's use.
6641
c0065db7 6642auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6643additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6644
c0065db7 6645"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6646documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6647
c0065db7
RM
6648The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6649occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6650One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6651below.
6652
6653@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6654For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6655object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6656offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6657field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6658in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6659without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6660The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6661references.
6662
c0065db7
RM
6663The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6664be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6665themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6666runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6667compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6668support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6669run without error on an older system.
6670
c0065db7
RM
6671@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6672enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6673
6674@cindex direct linking to a dll
6675@item direct linking to a dll
6676The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6677including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6678libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6679traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6680libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6681function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6682though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6683storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6684tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6685large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6686
c0065db7 6687Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6688@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6689of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6690perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6691select the dll instead of an import library.
6692
2ca22b03 6693
69da35b5
NC
6694For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6695to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6696
6697@example
45e948fe
NC
6698libxxx.dll.a
6699xxx.dll.a
6700libxxx.a
6701xxx.lib
69da35b5 6702cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6703libxxx.dll
6704xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6705@end example
6706
69da35b5
NC
6707before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6708
c0065db7
RM
6709(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6710where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6711@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6712file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6713@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6714
c0065db7
RM
6715Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6716@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6717was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6718various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6719could coexist on the same machine.
6720
2ca22b03
NC
6721The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6722applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6723libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6724
6725@example
6726bin/
6727 cygxxx.dll
6728lib/
6729 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6730 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6731@end example
6732
c0065db7
RM
6733Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6734done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6735
67361. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6737@example
6738gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6739@end example
2ca22b03 6740
69da35b5
NC
6741However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6742(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6743@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6744not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6745
2ca22b03
NC
67462. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6747directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6748should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6749making the app/dll.
6750
6751@example
6752ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6753@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6754
6755Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6756
6757@example
6758gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6759@end example
69da35b5
NC
6760
6761This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6762perfectly legal
6763
6764@example
6765bin/
6766 cygxxx-5.dll
6767lib/
c0065db7 6768 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6769@end example
6770
dc8465bf 6771Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6772even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6773@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6774
6775Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6776wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6777
67781. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6779work with auto-imported data.
6780
dc8465bf
NC
67812. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6782import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6783symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6784for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6785possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6786
45e948fe
NC
67873. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6788critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6789in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6790stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6791
69da35b5 6792So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6793true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6794a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6795binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6796massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6797requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6798will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6799
c0065db7 6800@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6801@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6802@item adding additional names
6803Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6804A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6805exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6806when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6807import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6808
c0065db7 6809@example
dc8465bf
NC
6810LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6811
6812EXPORTS
c0065db7 6813foo
dc8465bf 6814_foo = foo
c0065db7 6815@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6816
6817The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6818
6819Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6820source code using the "weak" attribute:
6821
c0065db7
RM
6822@example
6823void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6824void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6825@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6826
6827See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6828symbols.
6829
6830@item renaming symbols
6831Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6832kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6833@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6834DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6835created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6836
c0065db7 6837@example
dc8465bf
NC
6838LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6839
6840EXPORTS
6841_foo = foo
c0065db7 6842@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6843
6844The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6845@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6846@end table
dc8465bf 6847
0a5d968e 6848Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6849unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6850If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6851@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6852that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6853@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6854renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6855to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6856the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6857In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6858which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6859
6860@cindex weak externals
6861@item weak externals
6862The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6863weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6864defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6865are three variants of weak externals:
6866@itemize
6867@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6868called lazy externals.
6869@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6870This form is not presently implemented.
6871@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6872implemented.
6873@end itemize
6874As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6875are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6876uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6877@end table
6878
6879@ifclear GENERIC
6880@lowersections
6881@end ifclear
6882@end ifset
6883
e0001a05
NC
6884@ifset XTENSA
6885@ifclear GENERIC
6886@raisesections
6887@end ifclear
6888
6889@node Xtensa
6890@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6891
6892@cindex Xtensa processors
6893The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6894@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6895specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6896keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6897example, with the command:
6898
6899@smallexample
6900SECTIONS
6901@{
6902 .text : @{
6903 *(.literal .text)
6904 @}
6905@}
6906@end smallexample
6907
6908@noindent
6909@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6910and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6911literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6912interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6913group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6914files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6915and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6916
43cd72b9 6917@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6918@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6919Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6920provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6921is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6922literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6923will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6924location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6925the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6926unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6927@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6928range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6929
6930For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6931to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6932instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6933instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6934instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6935@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6936hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6937By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6938switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6939density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6940instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6941performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6942linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6943a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6944
6945The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6946control the linker:
6947
6948@cindex Xtensa options
6949@table @option
e0001a05 6950@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6951@item --no-relax
6952Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6953by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6954relaxation.
6955
6956@item --size-opt
6957When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6958more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6959no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6960alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6961preserve the correctness of the code.
6962@end table
e0001a05
NC
6963
6964@ifclear GENERIC
6965@lowersections
6966@end ifclear
6967@end ifset
6968
252b5132
RH
6969@ifclear SingleFormat
6970@node BFD
6971@chapter BFD
6972
6973@cindex back end
6974@cindex object file management
6975@cindex object formats available
6976@kindex objdump -i
6977The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6978These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6979object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6980format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6981it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6982associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6983object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6984(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6985list all the formats available for your configuration.
6986
6987@cindex BFD requirements
6988@cindex requirements for BFD
6989As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6990several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6991BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6992formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6993been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6994BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6995may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6996
6997One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6998mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6999useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7000conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7001
7002@menu
7003* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7004@end menu
7005
7006@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7007@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7008@cindex opening object files
7009@include bfdsumm.texi
7010@end ifclear
7011
7012@node Reporting Bugs
7013@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7014@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7015@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7016
ff5dcc92 7017Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7018
7019Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7020it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7021to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7022work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7023@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7024
7025In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7026information that enables us to fix the bug.
7027
7028@menu
7029* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7030* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7031@end menu
7032
7033@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7034@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7035@cindex bug criteria
7036
7037If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7038
7039@itemize @bullet
7040@cindex fatal signal
7041@cindex linker crash
7042@cindex crash of linker
7043@item
7044If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7045@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7046
7047@cindex error on valid input
7048@item
ff5dcc92 7049If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7050
7051@cindex invalid input
7052@item
ff5dcc92 7053If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7054may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7055object files are correct.
7056
7057@item
7058If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7059improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7060@end itemize
7061
7062@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7063@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7064@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7065@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7066
7067A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7068products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7069recommend you contact that organization first.
7070
7071You can find contact information for many support companies and
7072individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7073distribution.
7074
ad22bfe8 7075@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7076Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7077@value{BUGURL}.
7078@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7079
7080The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7081@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7082fact or leave it out, state it!
7083
7084Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7085problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7086assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7087matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7088the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7089location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7090were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7091into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7092specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7093and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7094
7095Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7096the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7097on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7098
7099Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7100bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7101respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7102You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7103
7104To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7105
7106@itemize @bullet
7107@item
ff5dcc92 7108The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7109the @samp{--version} argument.
7110
7111Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7112the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7113
7114@item
ff5dcc92 7115Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7116patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7117
7118@item
7119The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7120version number.
7121
7122@item
ff5dcc92 7123What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7124``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7125
7126@item
7127The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7128observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7129list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7130sufficient.
7131
7132If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7133and then we might not encounter the bug.
7134
7135@item
7136A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7137bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7138provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7139bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7140state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7141requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7142we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7143attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7144
7145If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7146@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7147object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7148@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7149how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7150
7151@item
7152A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7153incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7154
ff5dcc92 7155Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7156will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7157not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7158a chance to make a mistake.
7159
7160Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7161say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7162copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7163C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7164and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7165fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7166you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7167any conclusion from our observations.
7168
7169@item
ff5dcc92 7170If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7171diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7172@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7173If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7174context, not by line number.
7175
7176The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7177sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7178@end itemize
7179
7180Here are some things that are not necessary:
7181
7182@itemize @bullet
7183@item
7184A description of the envelope of the bug.
7185
7186Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7187which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7188changes will not affect it.
7189
7190This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7191will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7192with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7193We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7194
7195Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7196of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7197output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7198less time, and so on.
7199
7200However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7201report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7202
7203@item
7204A patch for the bug.
7205
7206A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7207the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7208a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7209to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7210
ff5dcc92 7211Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7212construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7213through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7214able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7215fixed.
7216
7217And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7218patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7219help us to understand.
7220
7221@item
7222A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7223
7224Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7225things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7226@end itemize
7227
7228@node MRI
7229@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7230@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7231To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7232linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7233alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7234described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7235simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7236@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7237linker commands; these commands are described here.
7238
7239In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7240file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7241features to make use of them.
7242
7243You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7244@samp{-c} command-line option.
7245
7246Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7247command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7248blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7249MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7250issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7251
7252Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7253
7254You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7255lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7256The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7257
7258@table @code
7259@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7260@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7261@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7262Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7263the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7264@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7265your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7266script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7267commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7268input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7269@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7270
7271@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7272@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7273Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7274in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7275
7276@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7277
7278@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7279@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7280Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7281@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7282
7283@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7284@item BASE @var{expression}
7285Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7286absolute addresses) in the output file.
7287
7288@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7289@item CHIP @var{expression}
7290@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7291This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7292
7293@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7294@item END
7295This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7296
7297@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7298@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7299Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7300language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7301
7302@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7303@item
252b5132
RH
7304S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7305
7306@item
7307IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7308
7309@item
7310COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7311@samp{COFF}
7312@end enumerate
7313
7314@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7315@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7316Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7317@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7318
7319The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7320same line, with no change in its effect.
7321
7322@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7323@item LOAD @var{filename}
7324@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7325Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7326same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7327command line.
7328
7329@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7330@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7331@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7332MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7333option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7334
7335@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7336@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7337@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7338Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7339order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7340script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7341sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7342file, in the order specified.
7343
7344@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7345@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7346@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7347@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7348Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7349@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7350
7351@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7352@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7353@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7354@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7355You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7356specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7357If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7358@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7359@end table
7360
793c5807
NC
7361@node GNU Free Documentation License
7362@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7363@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7364
370b66a1
CD
7365@node LD Index
7366@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7367
7368@printindex cp
7369
7370@tex
7371% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7372% meantime:
7373\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7374\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7375\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7376\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7377\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7378\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7379\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7380\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7381\page\colophon
7382% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7383@end tex
7384
252b5132 7385@bye
This page took 0.80707 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.